<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Dd4518</id>
	<title>ChemWiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Dd4518"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/wiki/Special:Contributions/Dd4518"/>
	<updated>2026-05-16T09:42:48Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_6_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806191</id>
		<title>File:RD 6 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_6_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806191"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T19:52:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_5_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806189</id>
		<title>File:RD 5 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_5_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806189"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T19:42:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: Dd4518 uploaded a new version of File:RD 5 dd4518.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_5_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806188</id>
		<title>File:RD 5 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_5_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806188"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T19:39:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: Dd4518 uploaded a new version of File:RD 5 dd4518.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_5_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806187</id>
		<title>File:RD 5 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_5_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806187"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T19:39:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_4_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806186</id>
		<title>File:RD 4 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_4_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806186"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T19:31:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: Dd4518 uploaded a new version of File:RD 4 dd4518.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_4_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806185</id>
		<title>File:RD 4 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_4_dd4518.png&amp;diff=806185"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T19:29:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:SP_osc.PNG&amp;diff=806155</id>
		<title>File:SP osc.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:SP_osc.PNG&amp;diff=806155"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T15:09:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:SP_dd4518.PNG&amp;diff=806154</id>
		<title>File:SP dd4518.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:SP_dd4518.PNG&amp;diff=806154"/>
		<updated>2020-05-18T15:01:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805987</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805987"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T23:12:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_dd4518.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The mathematical requirements that distinguish saddle points from maxima and minima.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and identical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product channels on the potential surface. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspond to the saddle point of the potential surface as shown in figure 3. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured. Thus the point (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_osc.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 3: Oscillations about the transition state on the edges of the saddle point.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 4: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 5: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_MEP.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 6: The MEP reaction path from slight displacement from transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MEP and dynamics trajectories differ in that only the latter exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations in the product channel. The MEP trajectory stems from infintely slow motion and hence the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does during vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates about it, preserving its total energy as potential energy drops&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but the total energy not high enough for the system to reach the transition state. In the other simulations the total energy is sufficient. However, simulation 4 is unreactive; the H-H bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but in this simulation the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once again to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 7: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 8&lt;br /&gt;
: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result of the fourth simulation in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too high; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four in which barrier recrossing occurs as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flaw of assumption 1 is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm is substantially higher than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states of similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions involve &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar. In the case of exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel on potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product channel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory directions switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same in opposite coordinates;22@| approximateliy at BC=75.5 and AB=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial systems at equilibrium must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is converted to H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Discuss how the distribution of energy between different modes (translation and vibration) affect the efficiency of the reaction, and how this is influenced by the position of the transition state. &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Polanyi&#039;s rules elucidate the importance of different forms of kinetic energy for promoting a bimolecular reaction depending on the nature of the transition state. If the reaction is exothermic with an early (type 1) transition state, translational and rotational energy is most important for promoting a successful reaction. If a reaction proceeds by a late transition state, the vibrational energy is most important, as is the case for the H + HF reaction discussed above.&lt;br /&gt;
These two scenarios are extremes and most reactions involve transition states somewhere in between the two, with both translational and vibrational energy being converted to potential energy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The F + H2 reaction is exothermic and has an early transition state with low energy. As expected from Polanskyi&#039;s rules, the translational motion is most important for reaction to occur. In fact, simulations showed that reaction could even happen with no vibrational energy at all. The situation is opposite for the reverse H + HF reaction which is promoted by vibrational motion in the reactant channel. The trajectories of these simulations are shown in the figures below and correspond well with Polanski&#039;s rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RD_4_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 12]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RD_5_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 13]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RD_6_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 14]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805986</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805986"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T23:10:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_dd4518.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The mathematical requirements that distinguish saddle points from maxima and minima.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and identical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product channels on the potential surface. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspond to the saddle point of the potential surface as shown in figure 3. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured. Thus the point (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_osc.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 3: Oscillations about the transition state on the edges of the saddle point.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 4: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 5: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_MEP.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 6: The MEP reaction path from slight displacement from transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MEP and dynamics trajectories differ in that only the latter exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations in the product channel. The MEP trajectory stems from infintely slow motion and hence the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does during vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates about it, preserving its total energy as potential energy drops&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but the total energy not high enough for the system to reach the transition state. In the other simulations the total energy is sufficient. However, simulation 4 is unreactive; the H-H bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but in this simulation the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once again to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 7: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 8&lt;br /&gt;
: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result of the fourth simulation in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too high; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four in which barrier recrossing occurs as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flaw of assumption 1 is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm is substantially higher than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states of similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions involve &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar. In the case of exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel on potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product channel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory directions switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same in opposite coordinates;22@| approximateliy at BC=75.5 and AB=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial systems at equilibrium must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is converted to H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Discuss how the distribution of energy between different modes (translation and vibration) affect the efficiency of the reaction, and how this is influenced by the position of the transition state. &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Polanyi&#039;s rules elucidate the importance of different forms of kinetic energy for promoting a bimolecular reaction depending on the nature of the transition state. If the reaction is exothermic with an early (type 1) transition state, translational and rotational energy is most important for promoting a successful reaction. If a reaction proceeds by a late transition state, the vibrational energy is most important, as is the case for the H + HF reaction discussed above.&lt;br /&gt;
These two scenarios are extremes and most reactions involve transition states somewhere in between the two, with both translational and vibrational energy being converted to potential energy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The F + H2 reaction is exothermic and has an early transition state with low energy. As expected from Polanskyi&#039;s rules, the translational motion is most important for reaction to occur. In fact, simulations showed that reaction could even happen with no vibrational energy at all. The situation is opposite for the reverse H + HF reaction which is promoted by vibrational motion in the reactant channel. The trajectories of these simulations are shown in the figures below and correspond well with Polanski&#039;s rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805985</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805985"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T23:03:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_dd4518.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The mathematical requirements that distinguish saddle points from maxima and minima.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and identical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product channels on the potential surface. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspond to the saddle point of the potential surface as shown in figure 3. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured. Thus the point (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_osc.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 3: Oscillations about the transition state on the edges of the saddle point.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 4: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 5: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_MEP.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 6: The MEP reaction path from slight displacement from transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MEP and dynamics trajectories differ in that only the latter exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations in the product channel. The MEP trajectory stems from infintely slow motion and hence the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does during vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates about it, preserving its total energy as potential energy drops&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but the total energy not high enough for the system to reach the transition state. In the other simulations the total energy is sufficient. However, simulation 4 is unreactive; the H-H bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but in this simulation the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once again to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 7: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 8&lt;br /&gt;
: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result of the fourth simulation in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too high; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four in which barrier recrossing occurs as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flaw of assumption 1 is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm is substantially higher than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states of similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions involve &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar. In the case of exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel on potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product channel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory directions switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same in opposite coordinates;22@| approximateliy at BC=75.5 and AB=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial systems at equilibrium must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is converted to H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Discuss how the distribution of energy between different modes (translation and vibration) affect the efficiency of the reaction, and how this is influenced by the position of the transition state. &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Polanyi&#039;s rules elucidate the importance of different forms of kinetic energy for promoting a bimolecular reaction depending on the nature of the transition state. If the reaction is exothermic with an early (type 1) transition state, translational and rotational energy is most important for promoting a successful reaction. If a reaction proceeds by a late transition state, the vibrational energy is most important, as IST the case for the H + HF reaction discussed above.&lt;br /&gt;
These two scenarios are extremes and most reactions involve transition states somewhere in between the two, with both translational and vibrational energy being converted to potential energy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The F + H2 reaction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805958</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805958"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T22:36:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_dd4518.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The mathematical requirements that distinguish saddle points from maxima and minima.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and identical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product channels on the potential surface. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspond to the saddle point of the potential surface as shown in figure 3. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured. Thus the point (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_osc.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 3: Oscillations about the transition state on the edges of the saddle point.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 4: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 5: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_MEP.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 6: The MEP reaction path from slight displacement from transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MEP and dynamics trajectories differ in that only the latter exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations in the product channel. The MEP trajectory stems from infintely slow motion and hence the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does during vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates about it, preserving its total energy as potential energy drops&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but the total energy not high enough for the system to reach the transition state. In the other simulations the total energy is sufficient. However, simulation 4 is unreactive; the H-H bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but in this simulation the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once again to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 7: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 8&lt;br /&gt;
: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result of the fourth simulation in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too high; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four in which barrier recrossing occurs as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flaw of assumption 1 is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm is substantially higher than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states of similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions involve &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar. In the case of exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel on potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product channel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory directions switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same in opposite coordinates;22@| approximateliy at BC=75.5 and AB=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial systems at equilibrium must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is converted to H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Discuss how the distribution of energy between different modes (translation and vibration) affect the efficiency of the reaction, and how this is influenced by the position of the transition state. &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the reaction of HF + H -&amp;gt; H2 + F, a higher vibrational energy of the HF molecule is required, as stated by polyani&#039;s rules. This is due to the relatively late transition state of the endothermic reaction. Similarly for the reverse reaction, very little vibrational energy is required and only a slight amount of translational energy is required due to the low activation energy of the exothermic reaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Polanyi&#039;s rules elucidate the importance of different forms of kinetic energy for promoting a bimolecular reaction depending on the nature of the transition state. If the reaction is exothermic with an early (type 1) transition state, translational and rotational energy is most important for promoting a successful reaction. If a reaction proceeds by a late transition state, the vibrational energy is most important, as IST the case for the H + HF reaction discussed above.&lt;br /&gt;
These two scenarios are extremes and most reactions involve transition states somewhere in between the two, with both translational and vibrational energy being converted to potential energy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The F + H2 reaction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805921</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805921"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T22:13:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 1: H + H2 system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_dd4518.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The mathematical requirements that distinguish saddle points from maxima and minima.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and identical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product channels on the potential surface. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspond to the saddle point of the potential surface as shown in figure 3. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured. Thus the point (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_osc.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 3: Oscillations about the transition state on the edges of the saddle point.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 4: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 5: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_MEP.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 6: The MEP reaction path from slight displacement from transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MEP and dynamics trajectories differ in that only the latter exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations in the product channel. The MEP trajectory stems from infintely slow motion and hence the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does during vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates about it, preserving its total energy as potential energy drops&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but the total energy not high enough for the system to reach the transition state. In the other simulations the total energy is sufficient. However, simulation 4 is unreactive; the H-H bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but in this simulation the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once again to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 7: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 8&lt;br /&gt;
: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result of the fourth simulation in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too high; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four in which barrier recrossing occurs as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flaw of assumption 1 is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm is substantially higher than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states of similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions involve &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar. In the case of exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel on potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product channel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory directions switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same in opposite coordinates;22@| approximateliy at BC=75.5 and AB=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial systems at equilibrium must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is stored as H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805917</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805917"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T22:11:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_dd4518.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The mathematical requirements that distinguish saddle points from maxima and minima.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and identical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product channels on the potential surface. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspond to the saddle point of the potential surface as shown in figure 3. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured. Thus the point (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_osc.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 3: Oscillations about the transition state on the edges of the saddle point.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 4: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 5: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_MEP.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 6: The MEP reaction path from slight displacement from transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MEP and dynamics trajectories differ in that only the latter exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations in the product channel. The MEP trajectory stems from infintely slow motion and hence the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does during vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates about it, preserving its total energy as potential energy drops&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but the total energy not high enough for the system to reach the transition state. In the other simulations the total energy is sufficient. However, simulation 4 is unreactive; the H-H bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but in this simulation the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once again to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result of the fourth simulation in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too high; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four in which barrier recrossing occurs as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flaw of assumption 1 is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm is substantially higher than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states of similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions involve &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar. In the case of exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel on potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product channel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory directions switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same in opposite coordinates;22@| approximateliy at BC=75.5 and AB=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial systems at equilibrium must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is stored as H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805894</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805894"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T21:56:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 1: H + H2 system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_dd4518.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The mathematical requirements that distinguish saddle points from maxima and minima.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and identical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product channels on the potential surface. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspond to the saddle point of the potential surface as shown in figure 3. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured. Thus the point (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SP_osc.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 3: Oscillations about the transition state on the edges of the saddle point.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 4: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 5: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_MEP.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 6: The MEP reaction path from slight displacement from transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MEP and dynamics trajectories differ in that only the latter exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations in the product channel. The MEP trajectory stems from infintely slow motion and hence the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does during vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates about it, preserving its total energy as potential energy drops&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but the total energy not high enough for the system to reach the transition state. In the other simulations the total energy is sufficient. However, simulation 4 is unreactive; the H-H bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but in this simulation the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once again to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result of the fourth simulation in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too high; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four in which barrier recrossing occurs as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flaw of assumption 1 is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is stored as H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805721</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805721"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T21:09:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all reactions, excess energy tend to be released in the form it had prior to the reaction. This effect is known as adiabaticity. For example, excess translational energy will be converted to translational energy in the products. In the simulation above, there is an excess energy of -392.0 kJ/mol –(-433.82kJ/mol)=41.82 kJ/mol giving rise to a more energetic activated complex than necessary for reaction to occur. The relaxation from this state of extended AB and BC bond distances results in a vibrationally excited product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in figure 11, the energy taken up for the reaction to occur is mostly vibrational. This is a general feature of endothermic bimolecular reactions with late-barrier surfaces, and explains why the translational energy is about the same in the reactant and product systems. It is likely that less energetic reactive initial states in which all vibrational energy is lost to increasing potential energy are possible. In program 3, the excess vibrational energy is stored as H-H vibrations in the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the H + HF reaction is driven by vibrational motion can be confirmed experimentally by comparing the vibrational frequency of H-F in the initial system to H-H in the product system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805429</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805429"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:45:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* References */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [3] (1987). Reaction Dynamics. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 460-471). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805426</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805426"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:42:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_2_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805425</id>
		<title>File:RD 2 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_2_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805425"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:41:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: Dd4518 uploaded a new version of File:RD 2 dd4518.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805421</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805421"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:40:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 250 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_1_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 10: The reaction trajectory of the program 3 simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:RD_2_dd4518.png|thumb|Figure 11: Momenta vs time for Program 3&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_3_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805406</id>
		<title>File:RD 3 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_3_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805406"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:33:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_2_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805404</id>
		<title>File:RD 2 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_2_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805404"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:32:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_1_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805402</id>
		<title>File:RD 1 dd4518.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:RD_1_dd4518.png&amp;diff=805402"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:32:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805344</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805344"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:12:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73 || 220 || -2.0 || -3.0 || F || H || H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805338</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805338"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:11:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 3&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|73&lt;br /&gt;
|220&lt;br /&gt;
|-2.0&lt;br /&gt;
|-3.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805334</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805334"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T19:09:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Reaction Dynamics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reaction Dynamics ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805292</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805292"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:55:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Calculating the activation energy */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{a} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reaction Dynamics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805288</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805288"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:54:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Calculating the activation energy */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{tot} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The H + HF reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the endothermic reaction can be found in the same manner. As this potential surface is &amp;quot;repulsive&amp;quot; with a type 2 late transition state, the trajectory can&#039;t be followed easily by keeping AB constant. In stead, the H-H equillibrium distance of about 91.5 pm read from the contour diagram below is used to find the reactant channel energy as the BC distance goes to infinity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MEP_Ea.png|thumb|Figure 9: The MEP trajectory of a system progressing downwards from the transition state into the reactant channel. The energy difference along this path gives the activation energy.|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Distance AB /pm&lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 75.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 91.5 || 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 91.5|| 560.627&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the H + H-F system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{tot} = -433.819 -- 560.627 = 126.808 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reaction Dynamics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:MEP_Ea.png&amp;diff=805242</id>
		<title>File:MEP Ea.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:MEP_Ea.png&amp;diff=805242"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:38:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805220</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805220"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:32:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Calculating the activation energy */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{tot} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805217</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805217"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:30:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Calculating the activation energy */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.819&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activation energy of the F + H2 system is thus: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_{tot} = -433.819 -- 434.724 = 0.905 kJ mol^{-1}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805200</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805200"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:24:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!Total energy in kJ/mol&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|180.5 || 433.82&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|200 || 433.869&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|250 || 434.365&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|350 || 434.684&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|500 || 434.722&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|700 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1000 || 434.724&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805159</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805159"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:12:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Calculating the activation energy */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; The F + H2 reaction&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the two reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be calculated. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805154</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805154"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:11:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Locating the transition state */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;F + H2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be found. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805149</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805149"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:10:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Locating the transition state */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Trajectory Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5). The H + HF reaction is endothermic and will thus have a transition state close to the product channel on the potential energy surface. As this reaction is the reverse of the F + H2 reaction, the transition state will be the same, approximateliy at AB=75.5 and BC=180.5. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculating the activation energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;F + H2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By running a program with 0 initial momentum at the transition state, the total energy of the transition state can be obtained. In order to find the activation energy of the reactions, the potential energy of the initial system must also be found. This can be done by finding the limiting energy as the BC distance goes to infinity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:Ea_01522392.png&amp;diff=805140</id>
		<title>File:Ea 01522392.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:Ea_01522392.png&amp;diff=805140"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T18:04:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805040</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805040"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T17:33:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805039</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805039"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T17:32:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Locating the transition state */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm !! Direction of trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm || Direction of trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805037</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805037"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T17:31:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Locating the transition state */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm !! Direction of trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ caption&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm !! Direction of trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805035</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=805035"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T17:30:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Locating the transition state */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Locating the transition state ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the transition state is the saddle point of the potential energy surface, the gradient of postions near it will wither be directed towards the reactant or product channel. By running programs of initially stationary systems near the transition state, its location can be estimated as the point at which the trajectory direction switches. First, the BC coordinate was established, keeping the AB distance at 75 pm:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ caption&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance BC / pm !! Direction of trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 160 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 190 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 180 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 185 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table above shows that the BC coordinate of the transition state is about 180.5 pm. In order to find the AB corrdinate, the procedure was repeated but with BC held constant at 180.5pm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ caption&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
Distance AB / pm !! Direction of trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 75 || Product channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 80 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 77 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 76 || Reactant channel&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the transition state position is approximately (75.5,180.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804951</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804951"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T16:57:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* Locating the transition state */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Locating the transition state =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.PNG|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804948</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804948"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T16:56:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Locating the transition state =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Hammonds postulate, the transition state of a reaction is structurally similar to states with similar energy. For example, endothermic reactions have &amp;quot;late&amp;quot; transition states which are close in energy to the products and are hence structurally similar to the products. For exothermic reactions, the transition state is &amp;quot;early&amp;quot; and similar in energy to the reactants. This means that the transition state is structurally similar to the starting materials and close to the reactant channel in potential energy surfaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transition state of the exothermic F + H2 reaction is thus expected to lie closer to the reactant channel than the product challel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[FIle:exo_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 8: The transition state of the F + H2 reaction]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:Exo_01522392.PNG&amp;diff=804944</id>
		<title>File:Exo 01522392.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=File:Exo_01522392.PNG&amp;diff=804944"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T16:55:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804772</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804772"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T15:54:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804771</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804771"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T15:53:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804770</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804770"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T15:53:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The potential energy surface of program 1|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The potential energy surface of program 2|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804768</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804768"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T15:51:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Program 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The H + HF reaction potential energy surface. A:F, B:H, C:H.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The F + H2 reaction potential energy surface. A:H, B:H, C:F.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804751</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804751"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T15:40:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Program 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Distance r&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / pm (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (BC)&lt;br /&gt;
!Momentum p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;  / g mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; pm fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;(AB)&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom A&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom B&lt;br /&gt;
!Atom C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|40&lt;br /&gt;
|250&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|H&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The H + HF reaction potential energy surface. A:F, B:H, C:H.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The F + H2 reaction potential energy surface. A:H, B:H, C:F.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804748</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804748"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T15:39:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| Figure 6: The H + HF reaction potential energy surface. A:F, B:H, C:H.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| Figure 7: The F + H2 reaction potential energy surface. A:H, B:H, C:F.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804746</id>
		<title>01522392</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://chemwiki.ch.ic.ac.uk/index.php?title=01522392&amp;diff=804746"/>
		<updated>2020-05-15T15:39:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Dd4518: /* EXERCISE 1: H + H2 system */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== EXERCISE 1: H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;On a potential energy surface diagram, how is the transition state mathematically defined? How can the transition state be identified, and how can it be distinguished from a local minimum of the potential energy surface?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mathematically, the transition state is defined as the saddle point of the potential energy surface. The saddle point is one of the three types of stationary points of  3D surfaces, the other two being minima and maxima. At these points, the partial derivatives with respect to x and y are zero. In order to distinguish saddle points from local minimums on the potential energy surface, one must compute the second partial derivatives fxx, fyy and fxy.  If fxx*fyy-fxy&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;gt;0, the stationary point is a saddle point. (Steiner, 2008)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Report your best estimate of the transition state position (rts) and explain your reasoning illustrating it with a “Internuclear Distances vs Time” plot for a relevant trajectory.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Transition_state_01522392.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 1: The interatomic distances versus time for a position near the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate the transition state, simulations with 0 initial momenta and indentical positions were run. As the H + H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; surface is symmetric, the activated complex would not fall into either the reactant or product &amp;quot;valley&amp;quot;. However, the complex will oscillate when the positions given do not correspont to the saddle point of the potential surface. At interatomic distances of 90.8 pm, almost no oscillations occured; (90.8pm,90.8pm) corresponds to the transition state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_1.PNG|thumb|center|Figure 2: The reaction path from slight displacement from the transition state.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Comment on how the mep and the trajectory you just calculated differ.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reaction_path_2.PNG|thumb|center| Figure 3: The reaction path from slight displacement from transition state using Dynamics calculation.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mep and dynamics trajectories differ in that the dynamics trajectory exhibits low-amplitude internuclear vibrations as the AB distance goes to infinity. This difference is due to the fact that the mep reaction path corresponds to infintely slow motion as this means that the kinetic energy cannot oscillate like it does in vibrations. In the dynamics calculation the atoms do not follow the minimum energy path but oscillates in it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Complete the table above by adding the total energy, whether the trajectory is reactive or unreactive, and provide a plot of the trajectory and a small description for what happens along the trajectory. What can you conclude from the table?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=1&lt;br /&gt;
! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! p&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;/&amp;amp;nbsp;g.mol&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;.pm.fs&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;-1&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; !! E&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;tot&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; !! Reactive? !! Description of the dynamics !! Illustration of the trajectory&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.56 || -5.1  || 414.280 || Yes || The system starts off at equillibrium with no AB vibration, passes through the transition state and out again with some BC vibration || [[File:E1_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -4.1  || 420.077 || No || H and H&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; approach each other, put the kinetic energies are not great enough to surmount the transition state saddle point.  || [[File:E2_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3.1  || -5.1  || 413.977 || Yes || In this system, the reaction occurs with a considerable amout of excess energy in vibrational form.  || [[File:E3_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.1 || 357.277 || No || The system is highly energetic, but unreactive as the AB bond breaks after formation due to the recoil of the central atom being too great.  || [[File:E4_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -5.1  || -10.6 || 349.477 || Yes || The tradjectory of this calculation involves initial reactive combination followed by recombination of the AB hydrogen molecule, but in this case the BC hydrogen molecule combines again.|| [[File:E5_01522392.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows that for a reaction to occur, there is a minimum kinetic energy requirement. In the second simulation, the initial momenta are correct directionally but not great enough to reach the transition state. In the other calculations, the energy is sufficient. However, in simulation 4, the bond breaks after the first oscillation of the product due to excessive vibrational energy, a process called barrier recrossing. This also occurs in simulation 5, but here the inital hydrogen molecule dissociates once more to give the product- crossing the potential energy barrier twice. These barrier crossings are illustrated by the figures below showing how the bonds form and break more than once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC1_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 4: Simulation 4: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BC2_01522392.png|center|thumb|Figure 5: Simulation 5: interatomic distance versus time|380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Given the results you have obtained, how will Transition State Theory predictions for reaction rate values compare with experimental values?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transition state theory is based on 5 assumptions:&lt;br /&gt;
# Molecular systems cannot revert back to reactant molecules once the transition state col has been surmounted.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution can be used to find the energy distribution of the reactant molecules as well as the activated complexes that are converting to products, even though the whole system isn&#039;t in equillibrium.&lt;br /&gt;
# The motion of the system over the transition state col can be separated from the other motions associated with the activated complex.&lt;br /&gt;
# Chemical reactions can be treated in terms of classical motion over the barrier, ignoring quantum mechanical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth result obtained in the table above reveals that the first assumption of conventional transition state theory (CTST) has limited applicability. In this simultation, barrier recrossing results in no reaction even though the system did pass beyond the transition state barrier. The result of this error is that CTST predicts reaction rates that are too low; it erroneously counts collisions such as the one in simulation four as successful (Laidler [1], 1987). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flaw is adressed in variational transition state theory by varying the dividing surfaces which distinguishes the activated complex from reactants and products and choosing the surface position which gives the lowest rate. This brings the calculated rates closer to those obtained experimentally or by computational methods (Laidler [2], 1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXERCISE 2: F - H - H system  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;By inspecting the potential energy surfaces, classify the F + H2 and H + HF reactions according to their energetics (endothermic or exothermic). How does this relate to the bond strength of the chemical species involved?&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_1.png|thumb|center| The H + HF reaction potential energy surface. A:F, B:H, C:H.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:F+H2_2.png|thumb|center| The F + H2 reaction potential energy surface. A:H, B:H, C:F.|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The figures above show the potential energy surfaces of the reactions H + HF and F + H2 respectively. The former is endothermic, as the potential energy of the HF + H reactant channel given by AB≈74 pm than in the orthogonal H2 + F product channel given by BC≈91pm. The second reaction is exothermic as the potential energy of the H2 + F reactant channel again is higher than the F + H2 product channel of the potential surface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These observations correspond well with empirical bond strengths. The H-H bond strength is 436 kJ/mol   and weaker than the H-F bond with strength of 568 kJ/mol due to the the ionic contribution to the bond arising from the difference in electronegativity between F and H.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References  ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Steiner, E. (2008). Functions of several variables. In Steiner, E., The Chemsitry maths book (pp. 253-258). Oxford: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [1] (1987). Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 88-98). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row.&lt;br /&gt;
*Laidler, K. [2] (1987). Assumptions and Limitations of Conventional Transition State Theory. In Laidler, K., Theories of reaction rates (pp. 115-123). New York: Harper &amp;amp; Row&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Dd4518</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>